Kenwood Radio Manual GET0993-001A

KMM-X50BT
DIGITAL MEDIA RECEIVER

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
© 2013 JVC KENWOOD Corporation GET0993-001A (MN)
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 1 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:28 AM

Book Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm)
CONTENTS BEFORE USE
Warning
BEFORE USE 2 Do not operate any function that takes your attention away from safe driving.
BASICS 3 Caution
Volume setting:
GETTING STARTED 4
• Adjust the volume so that you can hear sounds outside the car to prevent accidents.
RADIO 5 • Lower the volume before playing digital sources to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden increase of
the output level.
USB / iPod 6 General:
• Avoid using the USB device or iPod/iPhone if it might hinder safe driving.
AUX 8
• Make sure all important data has been backed up. We shall bear no responsibility for any loss of recorded
Pandora® 9 data.
• Never put or leave any metallic objects (such as coins or metal tools) inside the unit, to prevent a short
BLUETOOTH® 9 circuit.
Remote control (RC-406):
DISPLAY SETTINGS 14
• Do not leave the remote control in hot places such as on the dashboard.
AUDIO SETTINGS 15 • The Lithium battery is in danger of explosion if replaced incorrectly. Replace it only with the same or
equivalent type.
MORE INFORMATION 16 • The battery pack or batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.
• Keep the battery out of reach of children and in its original packaging when not in used. Dispose of used
TROUBLESHOOTING 16
batteries promptly. If swallowed, contact a physician immediately.
INSTALLATION /
CONNECTION 18
SPECIFICATIONS 20
Maintenance
Cleaning the unit: Wipe off dirt on the faceplate with a dry silicone or soft
cloth.
Cleaning the connector: Detach the faceplate and clean the connector
gently with a cotton swab, being careful not to damage the connector. Connector (on the reverse
side of the faceplate)
How to read this manual

• Operations are explained mainly using buttons on the faceplate.
• [XX] indicates the selected items.
• ( XX) indicates references are available on the stated page.

BASICS
Faceplate Attach Remote control (RC-406)
Volume knob Remote sensor (Do

(turn/press) Display window not expose to bright
sunlight.)
Detach
Pull out the insulation sheet

How to reset when using for the first time.
Detach button
How to replace the battery
Your preset adjustments

will also be erased.
To Do this (on the faceplate) Do this (on the remote control)

Turn on the power Press B SRC. Press and hold SRC to turn off the power.
• Press and hold to turn off the power. ( Pressing SRC does not turn on the power. )
Adjust the volume Turn the volume knob. Press VOL or VOL .
Press ATT during playback to attenuate the sound.
• Press again to cancel.
Select a source Press B SRC repeatedly. Press SRC repeatedly.
Change the display Press DISP SCRL repeatedly.
( not available )
information • Press and hold to scroll the current display information.
ENGLISH | 3
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 3 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 17/12/2013 2:39:50 PM

GETTING STARTED
3 Set the initial settings
1 Press B SRC to enter STANDBY.
2 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
3 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table), then press
the knob.
4 Press and hold to exit.
1 Cancel the demonstration To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press .
Default: XX
When you turn on the power (or after you reset the unit), the
display shows: “CANCEL DEMO” “PRESS” “VOLUME KNOB” AUDIO CONTROL
1 Press the volume knob. SWITCH PREOUT REAR/ SUB-W: Selects whether rear speakers or a subwoofer are connected to
[YES] is selected for the initial setup. the line out terminals on the rear (through an external amplifier).
2 Press the volume knob again.
“DEMO OFF” appears. SP SELECT OFF/ 5/4/ 6 × 9/6/ OEM: Selects according to the speaker size (5 inches or
4 inches, 6×9 inches or 6 inches) or OEM speakers for optimum performance.
2 Set the clock TUNER SETTING
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION]. PRESET TYPE NORMAL: Memorizes one station for each preset button in each band (FM1/
2 Turn the volume knob to select [CLOCK], then press the knob. FM2/ FM3/ MW/ SW1/ SW2). ; MIX: Memorizes one station for each preset
3 Turn the volume knob to select [CLOCK ADJUST], then press the knob. button, regardless of the selected band.
4 Turn the volume knob to make the settings, then press the knob. SYSTEM
Day Hour Minute
5 Turn the volume knob to select [CLOCK FORMAT], then press the KEY BEEP ON: Activates the keypress tone. ; OFF: Deactivates.
knob. TDF ALARM ON: Activates the alarm if you forget to detach the faceplate when ACC is set to
6 Turn the volume knob to select [12H] or [24H], then press the knob. OFF. ; OFF: Deactivates.
SOURCE SELECT
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press .
PANDORA SRC ON: Enables PANDORA in source selection. ; OFF: Disables. ( 9)
While in clock display screen... BUILT-IN AUX ON: Enables AUX in source selection. ; OFF: Disables. ( 8)
Press and hold DISP SCRL to enter clock adjustment mode
directly. F/W UPDATE
Then, perform step 4 above to set the clock. UPDATE SYSTEM/ UPDATE BT
F/W UP xx.xx YES: Starts upgrading the firmware. ; NO: Cancels (upgrading is not activated).
For details on how to update the firmware, see: www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/
4

RADIO
Direct Access Tuning (using RC-406)
1 Press DIRECT to enter Direct Access Tuning.
2 Press the number buttons to enter a frequency.
3 Press ENT IW to search for a station.
• To cancel, press or DIRECT.
• If no operation is done for 10 seconds after step 2, Direct Access Tuning
is automatically canceled.
Search for a station
1 Press B SRC to select TUNER. Other settings
2 Press BAND repeatedly (or press *AM– / #FM+ on RC-406) to 1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
select FM1/ FM2/ FM3/ MW/ SW1/ SW2. 2 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table),
3 Press S / T (or press S / T (+) on RC-406) to search for a then press the knob.
station. 3 Press and hold to exit.
• To change the searching method for S / T : Press SEEK To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press .
repeatedly.
Default: XX
AUTO1: Automatically search for a station.
AUTO2: Search for a preset station. TUNER SETTING
MANUAL: Manually search for a station.
LOCAL SEEK ON: Searches only MW/ SW1/ SW2 stations with good reception. ;
• To store a station: Press and hold one of the number buttons (1 to 6).
OFF: Cancels.
• To select a stored station: Press one of the number buttons (1 to 6) (or
press one of the number buttons (1 to 6) on RC-406). AUTO MEMORY YES: Automatically starts memorizing 6 stations with good reception. ;
NO: Cancels. (Selectable only if [NORMAL] is selected for [PRESET TYPE].)
( 4)
Change the frequency steps
MONO SET ON: Improves the FM reception, but the stereo effect may be lost. ;
You can change the frequency step of: OFF: Cancels.
FM: 50 kHz to 200 kHz
MW: 9 kHz to 10 kHz NEWS SET ON: The unit will temporarily switch to News Programme if available. ;
1 Press and hold B SRC to turn off the power. OFF: Cancels.
2 While pressing number buttons 1 and 5, press B SRC. REGIONAL ON: Switches to another station only in the specific region using the “AF”
Release your fingers from the buttons after the display appears. control. ; OFF: Cancels.
• To restore the initial setting, repeat the same procedure. AF SET ON: Automatically searches for another station broadcasting the same
• When the frequency step is changed, the previously stored stations in program in the same Radio Data System network with better reception
the memory are deleted. when the current reception is poor. ; OFF: Cancels.
ENGLISH | 5

RADIO USB / iPod
TI ON: Allows the unit to temporarily switch to Traffic Information. ; Start playback
OFF: Cancels. The source changes automatically and playback starts.
PTY SEARCH Press the volume knob to enter PTY language selection. Turn the volume
knob to select the PTY language (ENGLISH/ FRENCH/ GERMAN), then USB
press the knob. USB input terminal
Selects the available Program Type (see the following), then, press
S / T to start. CA-U1EX (max.: 500 mA)
(optional accessory)
CLOCK
TIME SYNC ON: Synchronizes the unit’s time to the Radio Data System station time. ;
OFF: Cancels. and/ or
• [MONO SET]/ [NEWS SET]/ [REGIONAL]/ [AF SET]/ [TI]/ [PTY SEARCH] is selectable
only when the band is FM1/ FM2/ FM3. USB cable from the rear of the unit
• Available Program Type: iPod/iPhone
SPEECH: NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO (information), SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,
USB input terminal
SCIENCE, VARIED, WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE
IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, DOCUMENT
MUSIC: POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music),
CLASSICS, OTHER M (music), JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music), OLDIES,
FOLK M (music)
The unit will search for the Program Type categorized under [SPEECH] or and/ or
[MUSIC] if selected.
• If the volume is adjusted during reception of traffic information, alarm USB cable from the rear of the unit
or news bulletin, the adjusted volume is memorized automatically. It KCA-iP102 (optional accessory) or
will be applied the next time traffic information, alarm or news bulletin accessory cable of the iPod/iPhone*1
function is turned on.
Press 5 iPod to select the control mode while in iPod source.
MODE ON: From the iPod*2.
MODE OFF: From the unit.
If you connect the iPod/iPhone to the USB input terminal of the unit
(while listening to TuneIn Radio, TuneIn Radio Pro or Aupeo), the unit
will output the sound from these apps.

USB / iPod
Select a file from a list

For iPod: Applicable only when [MODE OFF] is
selected. ( 6)
1 Press .
2 Turn the volume knob to make a selection,
then press the knob.
• MP3/WMA/WAV/FLAC file: Select the
To Do this desired folder, then a file.
• iPod or KME Light/ KMC file: Select the
Pause or resume Press 6 IW (or press ENT IW on RC-406). desired file from the list (PLAYLISTS,
playback ARTISTS, ALBUMS, SONGS, PODCASTS*,
Select a file Press S / T (or press S / T (+) on RC-406). GENRES, COMPOSERS*).
* Only for iPod.
Select a folder *3 Press / (or press *AM– / #FM+ on RC-406).
• To return to the root folder (or first file), press
Reverse/ Press and hold S / T (or press and hold S / T (+) on RC-406). number button 5 iPod.
Fast-forward • To return to the previous setting item or
Repeat play *4 Press 4 repeatedly. hierarchy, press .
• To cancel, press and hold .
• MP3/WMA/WAV/FLAC file or iPod: FILE REPEAT, FOLDER REPEAT,
REPEAT OFF
If you have many files....
• KENWOOD Music Editor Light (KME Light)/ KENWOOD Music Control (KMC)
You can search through them quickly (on
file ( 16): FILE REPEAT, REPEAT OFF
step 2 above) at a preset skip search ratio by
Random play *4 Press 3 repeatedly. pressing S / T.
• MP3/WMA/WAV/FLAC file or iPod or KME Light/ KMC file: • See also “Set the skip search ratio.” ( 8)
FOLDER RANDOM, RANDOM OFF • Pressing and holding S / T skip songs at
the maximum ratio (10%) regardless of the
Press and hold 3 to select “ALL RANDOM”.
setting made.
*1 Do not leave the cable inside the car when not using. • For USB: Only for files registered in the
*2 You can still play/pause, file skip, fast-forward or reverse files from the unit. database created with KME Light/ KMC.
*3 Only for MP3/WMA/WAV/FLAC files. This does not work for iPod.
*4 For iPod: Applicable only when [MODE OFF] is selected.
ENGLISH | 7

USB / iPod AUX
Preparation:
Direct Music Search (using RC-406) Set the skip search ratio
Select [ON] for [BUILT-IN AUX]. ( 4)
1 Press DIRECT. While listening to iPod or KME Light/ KMC file...
2 Press the number buttons to enter a file 1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION]. Start listening
number. 2 Turn the volume knob to select [USB], then 1 Connect a portable audio player
3 Press ENT IW to search for music. press the knob. (commercially available).
• To cancel, press . 3 Turn the volume knob to select
[SKIP SEARCH], then press the knob. Auxiliary input jack
• Not available if Random Play is selected.
• Not applicable for iPod, KME Light/ KMC file. 4 Turn the volume knob to make a selection,
0.5% (default)/ 1%/ 5%/ 10%: Skip search
Select a song by name ratio over the total files.
Portable audio
While listening to iPod... 5 Press and hold to exit.
3.5 mm stereo mini plug with “L” player
1 Press . shaped connector (commercially
2 Turn the volume knob to select a category, Change the USB drive available)
3 Turn the volume knob quickly to enter
When a smartphone (Mass Storage Class) is 2 Press B SRC to select AUX.
connected to the USB input terminal, you can 3 Turn on the portable audio player and
character search.
select its internal memory or external memory start playback.
4 Turn the volume knob to select the
(such as an SD card) to playback the stored songs.
character to be searched for.
You can also select the desired drive to playback
5 Press S / T to move to the entry Set the AUX name
when a multiple drives device is connected.
position.
You can enter up to 3 characters. Press 5 iPod repeatedly to select the desired While listening to a portable audio player
drive. connected to the unit...
6 Press the volume knob to start searching.
7 Turn the volume knob to make a selection, (or)
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [SYSTEM],
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION]. then press the knob.
Repeat step 7 until the desired item is 2 Turn the volume knob to select [USB], then
selected.
3 Turn the volume knob to select [AUX NAME
press the knob. SET], then press the knob.
• To search for a character other than A to Z 3 Turn the volume knob to select 4 Turn the volume knob to make a selection,
*
and 0 to 9, enter only “ ”.
• To return to the previous hierarchy, press
[MUSIC DRIVE], then press the knob.
4 Press the volume knob to select
AUX (default)/ DVD/ PORTABLE/ GAME/ VIDEO/ TV
. [DRIVE CHANGE]. 5 Press and hold to exit.
• To return to the top menu, press number The next drive is selected automatically.
button 5 iPod. Repeat steps 1 to 4 to select the following drives.
• To cancel, press and hold . Selectable items: [DRIVE 1] to [DRIVE 5]

Pandora® BLUETOOTH®
Preparation: You can operate Bluetooth devices using this
To Do this
Install the latest version of the Pandora unit.
application onto your device (iPhone/ Pause or resume Press 6 IW (or press ENT IW
iPod touch), then create an account and playback on RC-406).
log in to Pandora. Connect the microphone
Thumbs up or Press / . Microphone
• Select [ON] for [PANDORA SRC]. ( 4) thumbs down • If thumbs down is selected, the Rear panel (supplied)
Start listening current track is skipped.
1 Open the Pandora application on Skip a track Press T (or press T (+) on Microphone
your device. RC-406). input jack
2 Connect your device to the USB Create a new 1 Press and hold the volume
input terminal. station knob.
USB input terminal 2 Turn the volume knob to
select [FROM TRACK] or [FROM
ARTIST], then press the knob.
A new station is created based
on the current song or artist. Adjust the
Save a station Press and hold one of the microphone angle
Secure using cord clamps (not
number buttons (1 to 5) to supplied) if necessary.
store.
USB cable from the • To select a stored station, press
rear of the unit KCA-iP102 (optional one of the number buttons If you turn off the unit or detach the control
accessory) or accessory (1 to 5). panel during a phone call conversation,
cable of the iPod/iPhone* the Bluetooth connection is disconnected.
Search for a 1 Press .
The source changes to PANDORA registered 2 Turn the volume knob to Continue the conversation using your mobile
FRONT/ PANDORA REAR and station make a selection, then press phone.
broadcast starts. the knob (or press J / K on Supported Bluetooth profiles
RC-406). – Hands-Free Profile (HFP)
* Do not leave the cable inside the car [BY DATE]: According to the – Serial Port Profile (SPP)
when not using. registered date. – Phonebook Access Profile (PBAP)
[A-Z]: Alphabetical order. – Object Push Profile (OPP)
3 Turn the volume knob to the – Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP)
desired station, then press the – Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP)
knob.
ENGLISH | 9

BLUETOOTH®
Pair a Bluetooth device Bluetooth test mode

When connecting a Bluetooth device to the unit for the first time, You can check the connectivity of the supported profile between the
perform pairing between the unit and the device. Once the pairing is Bluetooth device and the unit.
completed, the Bluetooth device will remain registered in the unit even if • Make sure there is no Bluetooth device connected.
you reset the unit. 1 Press and hold .
• Up to five devices can be registered (paired) in total. “PLEASE PAIR YOUR PHONE” appears.
• A maximum of two Bluetooth phones and one Bluetooth audio device 2 Search and select this unit model name (KMM-X5*BT) on the
can be connected at any time. Bluetooth device.
• This unit supports Secure Simple Pairing (SSP). 3 Operate the Bluetooth device to confirm pairing.
• Some Bluetooth devices may not automatically connect to the unit “TESTING” flashes on the display.
after pairing. Connect the device to the unit manually. Refer to the
The connectivity result (OK or NG) appears after the test.
instruction manual of the Bluetooth device for more information.
PAIRING: Pairing status
1 Press B SRC to turn on the unit. HF CNT: Hands-Free Profile (HFP) compatibility
2 Search and select this unit model name (KMM-X5*BT) on the AUD CNT: Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP) compatibility
Bluetooth device. PB DL: Phonebook Access profile (PBAP) compatibility
“PAIRING” “PASS XXXXXX” Device name “PRESS” “VOLUME
• To cancel check mode, press and hold B SRC to turn off the unit.
KNOB” scrolls on the display.
3 Press the volume knob to start pairing.
“PAIRING OK” appears when pairing is completed and “BT” will light Bluetooth mobile phone
up when the Bluetooth connection is established.
To Do this
• For some Bluetooth devices, you may need to enter the Personal
Identification Number (PIN) code immediately after searching. Receive a call Press or the volume knob or one of the
• Pairing request (via Bluetooth) is automatically activated if an iPhone/ number buttons (1 to 6) (or press on
iPod touch is connected through the USB input terminal. (Applicable RC-406).
only if [AUTO PAIRING] is set to [ON].) ( 13) • All the button illumination flash when there
Press the volume knob to pair once you have confirm the device name. is an incoming call.
• When [AUTO ANSWER] is set to the selected
time, the unit answers incoming call
automatically. ( 12)
Reject an incoming Press B SRC (or press on RC-406).
call
End a call Press or B SRC (or press on RC-406).
10

BLUETOOTH®
To Do this Text message notification

Switch between Press 6 IW during a call. When the phone receives a text message, the unit rings and “SMS
hands-free and • Operations may vary according to the RECEIVED” appears.
private talk modes connected Bluetooth device. • You cannot read, edit, or send a message through the unit.
• To clear the message, press any button.
Adjust the phone Turn the volume knob during a call.
volume Phone volume: [00] to [35] (Default: [15])
• This adjustment will not affect the volume of Use Voice Recognition
the other sources. 1 Press and hold to activate Voice Recognition.
Switch between two Press repeatedly. The connected phone (which has been paired the earliest) is
connected phones • Not applicable during a call. activated. However, if priority device is connected, pressing and
holding activate the priority device. ( 13, DVC PRIORITY)
2 Speak the name of the contact you want to call or the voice
Improve the sound quality during a call command to control the phone functions.
• Supported Voice Recognition features vary for each phone. Refer to the
While talking on the phone... instruction manual of the connected phone for details.
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION]. • This unit also supports the intelligent personal assistant function of
2 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table), iPhone.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press . Bluetooth mode operations
Default: XX 1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
2 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table),
MIC GAIN –20 — +8 (0): The sensitivity of the microphone increases as the then press the knob.
number increased. 3 Press and hold to exit.
NR LEVEL –5 — –20 (–10): Adjust the noise reduction level until the least noise is To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press .
being heard during a phone conversation.
ECHO CANCEL 1 — 10 (4): Adjust the echo cancellation delay time until the least echo CALL 1 Press the volume knob to select a name or a phone number.
is being heard during a phone conversation. HISTORY • “I” indicates call received, “O” indicates call made, “M” indicates call
missed.
• Press DISP SCRL to change the display category (NUMBER or NAME).
• “NO DATA” appears if there is no recorded call history.
2 Press the volume knob to call.
ENGLISH | 11

BLUETOOTH®
PHONE BOOK 1 Turn the volume knob to select a name, then press the SETTINGS Default: XX
knob.
AUTO ANSWER 1 — 30: The unit answer incoming call automatically in the selected time. ;
2 Turn the volume knob to select a phone number, then
OFF: Cancels.
press the knob to call.
• If the phone supports PBAP, the phonebook of the RING MODE SYSTEM: The unit rings to notify you when a call/text message comes in.
connected phone is automatically transferred to the (Default ring tone is different according to the paired device.)
unit when pairing. If the phone does not support PBAP, • CALL: Selects your preferred ring tone (TONE 1 — 5) for incoming calls.
“TRANSFER PB” appears. Transfer the phonebook manually. • MESSAGE: Selects your preferred ring tone (TONE 1 — 5) for incoming text
( 13, TRANSFER PB) messages.
• Contacts are categorized as: MO (mobile), HM (home), PHONE: The unit uses the connected phones’ ring tone to notify you when a call/text
OF (office), OT (others), GE (general) message comes in. (The connected phone will ring if it does not support this feature.)
• This unit can display only non-accent letters. (Accent letters SMS NOTIFY* ON: The unit rings and “SMS RECEIVED” appears to notify you of an incoming text
such as “Ú” is showns as “U”.) message. ; OFF: Cancels.
• If the phonebook contains many contacts, ( Select a
contact by name). * Functionality depends on the type of the phone used.
NUMBER 1 Turn the volume knob to select a number (0 to 9) or
DIAL character ( , #, +). Select a contact by name
2 Press S / T to move the entry position. • You can search through the contacts quickly according to the first letter (A to Z),
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the phone number (0 to 9), or symbol.
number. • The second alphabet of the contact will be searched if the first alphabet does not
3 Press the volume knob to call. exist.
(or using RC-406) 1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode.
1 Press the number buttons (0 to 9) to enter the phone 2 Turn the volume knob to select [PHONE BOOK], then press the knob.
number. 3 Turn the volume knob quickly to enter alphabet search mode.
2 Press to call. The first menu (ABCDEFGHIJK) appears. To go to the other menu
VOICE Speak the name of the contact you want to call or use the (LMNOPQRSTUV or WXYZ1 ), press / .
voice command to control the phone functions. ( 11, Use 4 Turn the volume knob or press S / T to select the desired first letter, then
Voice Recognition) press the knob.
• To search with numbers, select “1”.
BATT* LOW/ MID/ FULL: Shows the strength of the battery. • To search with symbols, select “ ”.
SIGNAL* NO SIGNAL/ LOW/ MID/ MAX: Shows the strength of the 5 Turn the volume knob to select a name, then press the knob.
current received signal. 6 Turn the volume knob to select a phone number, then press the knob to call.
To return to the previous hierarchy, press .
12

BLUETOOTH®
Store a contact in memory Bluetooth mode settings

You can store up to 6 contacts. 1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode. 2 Turn the volume knob to select [BT MODE], then press the knob.
2 Turn the volume knob to select [CALL HISTORY], [PHONE BOOK], or 3 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table),
[NUMBER DIAL], then press the knob. then press the knob.
3 Turn the volume knob to select a contact or enter a phone number. 4 Press and hold to exit.
If a contact is selected, press the volume knob to show the phone To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press .
number.
Default: XX
4 Press and hold one of the number buttons (1 to 6).
“STORED” appears when the contact is stored. PHONE SELECT
Selects the phone or audio device to connect or disconnect.
To erase a contact from the preset memory, select [NUMBER DIAL] in AUDIO SELECT
step 2 and store a blank number. DEVICE DELETE 1 Turn the volume knob to select a device to delete, then press the knob.
2 Turn the volume knob to select [YES] or [NO], then press the knob.
Make a call from memory
DVC PRIORITY Selects a device to be connected as priority device.
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode. “ ” appears in front of the device name set as priority.
2 Press one of the number buttons (1 to 6). TRANSFER PB* “DL PB ” appears and transfer the phonebook of the connected
3 Press the volume knob to call. phone to this unit manually.
“NO MEMORY” appears if there is no contacts stored. * Selectable only when the connected phone supports OPP.
Delete a contact PIN CODE EDIT Changes the PIN code (up to 6 digits).
(0000) 1 Turn the volume knob to select a number.
Not applicable for mobile phone that supports PBAP. 2 Press S / T to move the entry position.
1 Press to enter Bluetooth mode. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you finish entering the PIN code.
2 Turn the volume knob to select [CALL HISTORY] or [PHONE BOOK], then 3 Press the volume knob to confirm.
press the knob. RECONNECT ON: The unit automatically reconnect when the Bluetooth device is within
3 Turn the volume knob to select a contact. range. ; OFF: Cancels.
If a contact is selected, press the volume knob to show the phone
number. AUTO PAIRING ON: The unit automatically pair supported Bluetooth device (iPhone/iPod
4 Press and hold the volume knob to enter delete mode. touch) when it is connected through USB input terminal. Depending on
5 Turn the volume knob to select [DELETE ONE] or [DELETE ALL], then the iOS version of the connected iPhone/iPod touch, this function may not
press the knob. work. ; OFF: Cancels.
DELETE ONE: Selected name or phone number in step 3 is deleted. BT HF/AUDIO FRONT: Ouputs audio from the front left and right speakers. ;
DELETE ALL: All names or phone numbers from the selected menu in ALL: Outputs audio from all the speakers.
step 2 is deleted. INITIALIZE YES: Initializes all the Bluetooth settings (including stored pairing,
6 Turn the volume knob to select [YES] or [NO], then press the knob. phonebook, and etc.). ; NO: Cancels.
ENGLISH | 13

BLUETOOTH® DISPLAY SETTINGS
Internet radio via Bluetooth 1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION].
2 Turn the volume knob to select [DISPLAY], then
Listen to Pandora press the knob.
Preparation: 3 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see
Select [ON] for [PANDORA SRC]. ( 4) the following table), then press the knob.
You can listen to Pandora on your smart phone (Android OS) through Bluetooth on this unit. Repeat step 3 until the desired item is selected or
activated.
1 Open the Pandora application on your device.
2 Connect to Bluetooth audio player. ( 9) 4 Press and hold to exit.
3 Press B SRC to select PANDORA. To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy,
The source switches and broadcast starts automatically. press .
• You can operate Pandora in the same way as Pandora for iPod/iPhone. ( 9) Default: XX
COLOR SELECT VARIABLE SCAN/ COLOR 01 — COLOR 24/
Bluetooth audio player USER: Selects your preferred button illumination
Operations and display indications may differ according to their availability on the color.
connected device. You can create your own color (when
[COLOR 01] — [COLOR 24] or [USER] is
To Do this selected). The color you have created can be
selected when you select [USER].
Playback 1 Press B SRC (or press SRC on RC-406) to select BT AUDIO. 1 Press and hold the volume knob to enter the
2 Operate the Bluetooth audio player to start playback. detailed color adjustment.
Pause or resume Press 6 IW (or press ENT IW on RC-406). 2 Press S / T to select the color
playback (R/ G/ B) to adjust.
3 Turn the volume knob to adjust the level
Select group or folder Press / (or press *AM– / #FM+ on RC-406). (0 — 9), then press the knob.
Reverse/forward skip Press S / T (or press S / T (+) on RC-406). DIMMER ON: Dims the display and button illumination. ;
OFF: Illuminates according to the
Reverse/fast-forward Press and hold S / T (or press and hold S / T (+) on [BRIGHTNESS] settings.
RC-406).
BRIGHTNESS LVL 0 — LVL 31: Selects your preferred
Repeat play Press 4 repeatedly to make a selection. brightness level for display and button
ALL REPEAT, FILE REPEAT, REPEAT OFF illumination.
Random play Press 3 repeatedly to make a selection. TEXT SCROLL AUTO/ ONCE: Selects whether to scroll the
display information automatically, or scroll only
FOLDER RANDOM, RANDOM OFF once. ; OFF: Cancels.
Press and hold 3 to select “ALL RANDOM.”
14

AUDIO SETTINGS
While listening to any source... PRESET EQ DRIVE EQ/ TOP40/ POWERFUL/ ROCK/ POPS/ EASY/ JAZZ/
1 Press the volume knob to enter [FUNCTION]. NATURAL/ USER: Selects a preset equalizer suitable to the music
2 Turn the volume knob to select [AUDIO CONTROL], then press the knob. genre. (Select [USER] to use the customized bass, middle, and treble
3 Turn the volume knob to make a selection (see the following table), settings.)
then press the knob. [DRIVE EQ] is a preset equalizer that reduces noise from the road.
Repeat step 3 until the desired item is selected or activated.
4 Press and hold to exit. BASS BOOST LV1/ LV2/ LV3: Selects your preferred bass boost level. ; OFF: Cancels.
(or using RC-406) LOUDNESS LV1/ LV2: Selects your preferred low and high frequencies boost to
1 Press AUD to enter [AUDIO CONTROL]. produce a well-balanced sound at a low volume level. ; OFF: Cancels.
2 Press J / K to make a selection, then press ENT IW. SUBWOOFER SET ON: Turns on the subwoofer output. ; OFF: Cancels.
To return to the previous setting item or hierarchy, press . LPF SUBWOOFER THROUGH: All signals are sent to the subwoofer. ; 85HZ/ 120HZ/
160HZ: Audio signals with frequencies lower than 85 Hz/ 120 Hz/
Default: XX 160 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.
SUB-W LEVEL –15 to +15 (0) Adjusts the subwoofer output level. SUB-W PHASE REVERSE (180°)/ NORMAL (0°): Selects the phase of the subwoofer
output to be in line with the speaker output for optimum performance.
BASS LEVEL –8 to +8 (+6) (Selectable only if a setting other than [THROUGH] is selected for
Adjusts the level to memorize for each source. (Before
MID LEVEL –8 to +8 (+5) making an adjustment, select the source you want to [LPF SUBWOOFER].)
adjust.) HPF THROUGH: All signals are sent to the speakers. ; 100HZ/ 120HZ/
TRE LEVEL –8 to +8 (0)
150HZ: Audio signals with frequencies higher than 100 Hz/ 120 Hz/
EQ PRO 150 Hz are sent to the speakers.
BASS ADJUST BASS CTR FRQ 60/ 80/ 100/ 200: Selects the center frequency. FADER R15 to F15 (0): Adjusts the rear and front speaker output balance.
BASS LEVEL –8 to +8 (+6): Adjusts the level. BALANCE L15 to R15 (0): Adjusts the left and right speaker output balance.
BASS Q FACTOR 1.00/ 1.25/ 1.50/ 2.00: Adjusts the quality factor. VOLUME OFFSET –8 to +8 (for AUX) ; –8 to 0 (for other sources): Presets the volume
BASS EXTEND ON: Turns on the extended bass. ; OFF: Cancels. (Default: 0) adjustment level of each source. (Before adjustment, select the source
you want to adjust.)
MID ADJUST MID CTR FRQ 0.5/ 1.0/ 1.5/ 2.5K: Selects the center frequency.
SOUND RECNSTR ON: Creates realistic sound by compensating the high-frequency
MID LEVEL –8 to +8 (+5): Adjusts the level. (Sound components and restoring the rise-time of the waveform that are lost
MID Q FACTOR 0.75/ 1.00/ 1.25: Adjusts the quality factor. reconstruction) in audio data compression. ; OFF: Cancels.
TRE ADJUST TRE CTR FRQ 10.0/ 12.5/ 15.0/ 17.5K: Selects the center frequency. • [SUB-W LEVEL]/ [SUBWOOFER SET]/ [LPF SUBWOOFER]/ [SUB-W PHASE] is
selectable only if [SWITCH PREOUT] is set to [SUB-W]. ( 4)
TRE LEVEL –8 to +8 (0): Adjusts the level. • [SUB-W LEVEL]/ [LPF SUBWOOFER]/ [SUB-W PHASE] is selectable only if
[SUBWOOFER SET] is set to [ON].
ENGLISH | 15

MORE INFORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING
General About iPod/iPhone Symptom Remedy
Detailed information and notes about the playable Made for
audio files are stated in an online manual on the - iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th generation) Sound cannot be heard. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.
following web site: - iPod classic • Check the cords and connections.
www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/audiofile/ - iPod nano (3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th generation) “PROTECT” appears and Check to be sure the terminals of the
Playable files - iPhone, iPhone 3G, 3GS, 4, 4S, 5 no operations can be speaker wires are insulated properly,
• Playable audio file: MP3 (.mp3), WMA (.wma), • For the latest compatible list and software versions of done. then reset the unit. If this does not
WAV (.wav), FLAC (.flac) iPhone/iPod, see: www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/ipod solve the problem, consult your nearest
• Playable USB device file system: FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 • You cannot operate iPod if “KENWOOD” or “ ” is service center.
Even when audio files comply with the standards listed displayed on iPod. • Sound cannot be heard. Clean the connectors. ( 2)
above, playback may be impossible depending on the About Pandora • The unit does not turn
types or conditions of media or device. • Pandora is available only in the U.S., Australia and on.
About USB devices New Zealand. • Information shown on
• This unit can play MP3/WMA/WAV/FLAC files stored • Because Pandora is a third-party service, the the display is incorrect.
on a USB mass storage class device. specifications are subject to change without prior The unit does not work Reset the unit. ( 3)
• You cannot connect a USB device via a USB hub. notice. Accordingly, compatibility may be impaired, or at all.
• Connecting a cable whose total length is longer than some or all of the services may become unavailable.
• Some functions of Pandora cannot be operated from • Radio reception is poor. • Connect the antenna firmly.
5 m may result in abnormal playback. • Static noise while • Pull the antenna out all the way.
• This unit cannot recognize a USB device whose rating this unit.
• For issues using the application, please contact listening to the radio.
is other than 5 V and exceeds 1 A.
Pandora at pandora-support@pandora.com. “NA FILE” appears. Make sure the media contains supported
About KENWOOD Music Editor Light audio files. ( MORE INFORMATION)
and KENWOOD Music Control About Bluetooth
• Depending on the Bluetooth version of the device, “READ ERROR” appears. Copy the files and folders onto the USB
• This unit supports the PC application KENWOOD Music device again. If this does not solve the
some Bluetooth devices may not be able to connect to
Editor Light and Android™ application KENWOOD problem, reset the USB device or use
this unit.
Music Control. another USB device.
• This unit may not work with some Bluetooth devices.
• When you play audio files with song data added using
• Signal conditions vary, depending on the “NO DEVICE” appears. Connect a USB device, and change the
the KENWOOD Music Editor Light or KENWOOD Music
surroundings. source to USB again.
Control, you can search for audio files by Genres,
• For more information about Bluetooth, visit the
Artists, Albums, Playlists, and Songs. “COPY PRO” appears. A copy-protected file is played.
following website: www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/
• KENWOOD Music Editor Light and KENWOOD Music “NA DEVICE” appears. Connect a supported USB device, and
Control are available on the following web site: check the connections.
www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/
“NO MUSIC” appears. Connect a USB device that contains
playable audio files.
16

TROUBLESHOOTING
Symptom Remedy Symptom Remedy

“iPod ERROR” appears. • Reconnect the iPod. Echo or noise occurs. • Adjust the microphone unit’s position. ( 9)
• Reset the iPod. • Check the [ECHO CANCEL] setting. ( 11)
“READING” keeps flashing. Do not use too many hierarchical levels or folders. Phone sound quality • Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
Elapsed playing time is not This is caused by how the tracks are recorded. is poor. device.
correct. • Move the car to a place where you can get a better signal
reception.
Correct characters are not This unit can only display uppercase letters, numbers, and a
displayed (e.g. album limited number of symbols. • Voice calling method • Use voice calling method in a more quiet environment.
name). is not successful. • Reduce the distance from the microphone when you
• “N/A VOICE TAG” speak the name.
“ADD ERROR” New station creation is unsuccessful. appears. • Make sure the same voice as the registered voice tag is
“SEARCH ERROR” used.
“CHECK DEVICE” Check the Pandora application on your device. “NOT SUPPORT” The connected phone does not support Voice Recognition
“NO SKIPS” The skip limit has been reached. appears. feature.
“NO STATIONS” No stations are found. • “NO ENTRY” appears. There is no registered device connected/found via
Bluetooth®
“STATION LIMIT” The number of registered stations has reached its limit. Retry • “NO PAIR” appears. Bluetooth.
Pandora
after deleting unnecessary stations from your device. “ERROR” appears. Try the operation again. If “ERROR” appears again, check
“UPGRADE APP” Make sure you have installed the latest version of the Pandora if the device supports the function you have tried.
application on your device. “NO INFO” appears. Bluetooth device cannot get the contact information.
“CONNECT ERROR” Communication is unstable. Sound is being • Reduce the distance between the unit and the Bluetooth
“RATING ERROR” Registration of thumbs up/thumbs down has failed. interrupted or skipped audio player.
“LICENSE ERROR” You try to access from a country which Pandora is not during playback of • Turn off, then turn on the unit and try to connect again.
deliverable. a Bluetooth audio • Other Bluetooth devices might be trying to connect to the
player. unit.
No Bluetooth • Search from the Bluetooth device again.
device is detected. • Reset the unit. ( 3) The connected • Check whether the connected Bluetooth audio player
Bluetooth audio supports Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP).
Pairing cannot be • Make sure you have entered the same PIN code to both the unit
Bluetooth®
player cannot be (Refer to the instructions of your audio player.)

made. and Bluetooth device. controlled. • Disconnect and connect the Bluetooth player again.
• Delete pairing information from both the unit and the
Bluetooth device, then perform pairing again. ( 10) • “HF ERROR XX” Reset the unit and try the operation again. If this does not
appears. solve the problem, consult your nearest service center.
“DEVICE FULL” The number of registered devices has reached its limit. Retry • “BT ERROR” appears.
appears. after deleting an unnecessary device. ( 13, DEVICE DELETE)
ENGLISH | 17

INSTALLATION / CONNECTION Warning
• The unit can only be used with a 12 V DC power supply, negative
Installing the unit (in-dash mounting)
ground.
• Disconnect the battery’s negative terminal before wiring and
mounting.
• Do not connect Battery wire (yellow) and Ignition wire (red) to the Do the required wiring.
car chassis or Ground wire (black) to prevent a short circuit. ( 19)
• Insulate unconnected wires with vinyl tape to prevent a short circuit.
• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after
installation.
Hook on the top side
Caution
• For safety’s sake, leave wiring and mounting to professionals. Orientate the trim plate as Dashboard of
Consult the car audio dealer. illustrated before fitting. your car
• Install this unit in the console of your vehicle. Do not touch the metal
parts of this unit during and shortly after use of the unit. Metal parts
such as the heat sink and enclosure become hot.
• Do not connect the [ wires of speakers to the car chassis or Ground
wire (black), or connect them in parallel. Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the
• Mount the unit at an angle of less than 30º. mounting sleeve firmly in place.
• If your vehicle wiring harness does not have the ignition terminal,
connect Ignition wire (red) to the terminal on the vehicle’s fuse box When installing without the mounting sleeve
which provides 12 V DC power supply and is turned on and off by the 1 Remove the mounting sleeve and trim plate from
ignition key. the unit.
• After the unit is installed, check whether the brake lamps, blinkers, 2 Align the holes in the unit (on both sides) with the
wipers, etc. on the car are working properly. vehicle mounting bracket and secure the unit with
• If the fuse blows, first make sure the wires are not touching car’s screws (commercially available).
chassis, then replace the old fuse with one that has the same rating. Use only the specified screws. Using wrong screws might damage the unit.
Basic procedure
1 Remove the key from the ignition switch, then How to remove the unit
disconnect the [ terminal of the car battery. 1 Detach the faceplate.
2 Connect the wires properly. 2 Fit the catch pin on the extraction keys
See Wiring connection. ( 19) into the holes on both sides of the trim
3 Install the unit to your car. plate, then pull it out.
See Installing the unit (in-dash mounting). 3 Insert the extraction keys deeply into the
4 Connect the [ terminal of the car battery. slots on each side, then follow the arrows
5 Reset the unit. ( 3) as shown on the right.
18

Wiring connection Part list for installation
Fuse (10 A) Front output, Rear/subwoofer output (A) Faceplate

USB cable
Microphone Antenna terminal

input jack
( 9) (B) Trim plate
If no connections are made, do not let the wire
come out from the tab.
White
Light blue/yellow To the steering wheel remote control
To front speaker (left) White/Black
(Steering remote adapter
Gray control wire)
(C) Mounting sleeve
To front speaker (right) Gray/Black
Green To the power control terminal when using

Blue/White
To rear speaker (left) Green/Black the optional power amplifier, or to the
(Power control wire) antenna control terminal in the vehicle.
Purple
To rear speaker (right) (D) Wiring harness
Purple/Black
Ignition switch
Car fuse box
Red Brown To connect the Kenwood navigation system,
(Ignition wire) (Mute control wire) refer your navigations manual.
(E) Extraction key
Yellow
Car fuse box (Battery wire)
Black (Ground wire)
To the metallic body or chassis
of the car
Battery
ENGLISH | 19

SPECIFICATIONS Subject to change without notice.
FM Frequency Range 87.5 MHz — 108.0 MHz (50 kHz space) WAV Decode RIFF waveform Audio Format
USB
87.9 MHz — 107.9 MHz (200 kHz space) (Linear PCM only)
Channel Space Selection 50 kHz/ 200 kHz FLAC Decode FLAC files
Usable Sensitivity (S/N = 26 dB) 8.2 dBf (0.71 μV/75 Ω)
Version Bluetooth Ver.2.1+EDR Certified
Quieting Sensitivity 17.2 dBf (2.0 μV/75 Ω)
Frequency Range 2.402 GHz — 2.480 GHz
(DIN S/N = 46 dB)
Output Power +4 dBm (MAX), 0 dBm (AVE) Power Class 2
Bluetooth
Frequency Response (±3 dB) 30 Hz — 15 kHz
Maximum Communication Range Line of sight approx. 10 m
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (MONO) 64 dB
Profile HFP (Hands-Free Profile)/ SPP (Serial Port
Stereo Separation (1 kHz) 40 dB
Tuner
Profile)/ PBAP (Phonebook Access Profile)/

MW/ Frequency Range Band 1 (MW) 531 kHz to 1 611 kHz (9 kHz space) OPP (Object Push Profile)/ A2DP (Advanced
SW1/ 530 kHz to 1 700 kHz (10 kHz space) Audio Distribution Profile)/ AVRCP (Audio/
SW2 Band 2 (SW1) 2 940 kHz to 7 735 kHz (5 kHz space) Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.3
Band 3 (SW2) 9 500 kHz to 10 135 kHz/
Maximum Output Power 50 W × 4
11 580 kHz to 18 135 kHz (5 kHz space)
Full Bandwidth Power 22 W × 4 (at less than 1 % THD)
Channel Space Band 1 9 kHz/10 kHz
Selection Speaker Impedance 4 Ω — 8 Ω
Band 2/ 3 5 kHz
Audio
Tone Action Bass 200 Hz ±8 dB
Usable Sensitivity MW 29.0 dBμ (28.2 μV)
Middle 2.5 kHz ±8 dB
(S/N = 20 dB) SW 30 dBμ (32 μV)
Treble 12.5 kHz ±8 dB
USB Standard USB 1.1, USB 2.0 (Full speed) Preout Level/Load (USB) 2 500 mV/10 kΩ
File System FAT12/ 16/ 32 Preout Impedance ≤ 600 Ω
Maximum Supply Current DC 5 V 1 A Frequency Response (±3 dB) 20 Hz — 20 kHz
Auxiliary
Frequency Response (±1 dB) 20 Hz — 20 kHz Input Maximum Voltage 1 200 mV
USB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (1 kHz) 105 dB Input Impedance 30 kΩ

Dynamic Range 88 dB
Channel Separation 90 dB Operating Voltage 14.4 V (10.5 V — 16 V allowable)
Maximum Current Consumption 10 A
General
MP3 Decode Compliant with MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3

WMA Decode Compliant with Windows Media Audio Operational Temperature Range 0°C — +40°C
Installation Size (W × H × D) 182 mm × 53 mm × 107 mm
Weight 0.54 kg
20

For Turkey libFLAC
Bu ürün 28300 sayılı Resmi Gazete’de yayımlanan Atik Elektrikli ve Elektronik Eşyalarin Kontrolü Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2007,2008,2009 Josh Coalson
Yönetmeliğe uygun olarak üretilmiştir. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
Eski Elektrik ve Elektronik Ekipmanların İmha Edilmesi Hakkında Bilgi (ayrı atık - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
toplama sistemlerini kullanan ülkeleri için uygulanabilir) the following disclaimer.
Sembollü (üzerinde çarpı işareti olan çöp kutusu) ürünler ev atıkları olarak - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
atılamaz. and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
Eski elektrik ve elektronik ekipmanlar, bu ürünleri ve ürün atıklarını geri distribution.
dönüştürebilecek bir tesiste değerlendirilmelidir. Yaşadığınız bölgeye en - Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used
yakın geri dönüşüm tesisinin yerini öğrenmek için yerel makamlara müracaat to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
edin. Uygun geri dönüşüm ve atık imha yöntemi sağlığımız ve çevremiz permission.
üzerindeki zararlı etkileri önlerken kaynakların korunmasına da yardımcı THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND ONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
olacaktır. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
• “Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
• iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
• Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
• Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
• Android is trademark of Google Inc.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by JVC KENWOOD Corporation is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
21

libFLAC For Turkey
Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2007,2008,2009 Josh Coalson Bu ürün 28300 sayılı Resmi Gazete’de yayımlanan Atik Elektrikli ve Elektronik Eşyalarin Kontrolü
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted Yönetmeliğe uygun olarak üretilmiştir.
provided that the following conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions Eski Elektrik ve Elektronik Ekipmanların İmha Edilmesi Hakkında Bilgi (ayrı atık
and the following disclaimer. toplama sistemlerini kullanan ülkeleri için uygulanabilir)
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of Sembollü (üzerinde çarpı işareti olan çöp kutusu) ürünler ev atıkları olarak
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided atılamaz.
with the distribution. Eski elektrik ve elektronik ekipmanlar, bu ürünleri ve ürün atıklarını geri
- Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used dönüştürebilecek bir tesiste değerlendirilmelidir. Yaşadığınız bölgeye
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written en yakın geri dönüşüm tesisinin yerini öğrenmek için yerel makamlara
permission. müracaat edin. Uygun geri dönüşüm ve atık imha yöntemi sağlığımız ve
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND ONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY çevremiz üzerindeki zararlı etkileri önlerken kaynakların korunmasına da
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES yardımcı olacaktır.
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, • “Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES‫ ؛‬LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS‫ ؛‬OR BUSINESS to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. • iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
• Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
• Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
• Android is trademark of Google Inc.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by JVC KENWOOD Corporation is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
٢١
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 21 23/12/2013 3:05:12 PM

‫ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ PCM) waveform RIFF‬ﺧﻄﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪WAV‬‬ ‫‪ ٨٧٫٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ١٠٨٫٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪FM‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪FLAC‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪FLAC‬‬ ‫‪ ٨٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ١٠٧٫٩‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ٢٠٠/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢٫١‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ + Bluetooth‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪EDR Certified‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ ٨٫٢‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ )‪ ٠,٧١‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٧٥ /‬ﺍﻭﻡ(‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ )‪ ٢٦ = S/N‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٢٫٤٠٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ٢٫٤٨٠‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪ ٢٫٠) dBf ١٧٫٢‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ٧٥ /‬ﺍﻭﻡ(‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺪﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )‪ ٤٦ = DIN S/N‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪ ٤+‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺕ )ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ(‪ ٠ ،‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫‪ ٣٠‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ١٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٣±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺕ )ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ( ﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ ٦٤‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﹰﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ )‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪) HFP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ(‪) SPP /‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ(‪) PBAP /‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‪OPP /‬‬ ‫‪ ٥٣١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١ ٦١١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪(MW) ١‬‬ ‫‪ MW/‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ(‪) A2DP /‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ(‪/‬‬ ‫)ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٩‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫‪SW1/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻟﻒ‬
‫‪) AVRCP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪٣٫١‬‬ ‫‪ ٥٣٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١ ٧٠٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪SW2‬‬
‫)ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ١٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻭﺍﻁ ‪٤ x‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫‪ ٢ ٩٤٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٧ ٧٣٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪(SW1) ٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ‪ ٢٢‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪) ٤ x‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪ ١‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫)ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭﻡ — ‪ ٨‬ﺃﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٩ ٥٠٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠ ١٣٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪(SW2) ٣‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٨ ±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ١١ ٥٨٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٨ ١٣٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫)ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٢,٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٨ ±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ١٠/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪١‬‬
‫‪ ١٢٫٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ٨ ±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪٣ /٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ )‪ ٢ ٥٠٠ (USB‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ١٠/‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ ٢٩٫٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻴﻮ )‪ ٢٨٫٢‬ﻣﻴﻮ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬ ‫‪MW‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ≥ ‪ ٦٠٠‬ﺍﻭﻡ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻴﻮ )‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻴﻮ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ )‪SW = S/N‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ٢٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٣±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫‪ ١ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪) USB 2.0 ،USB 1.1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺼﻮﻯ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪32 /16 /FAT12‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻺﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ١٤,٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ‪ ١٠,٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ — ‪ ١٦‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ(‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٢٠‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ — ‪ ٢٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ١±‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ(‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ )‪ ١‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ‪ ١٠٥‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻠﺰﻳﻮﺱ — ‪ ٤٠+‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻠﺰﻳﻮﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ ٨٨‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ x‬ﻃﻮﻝ ‪ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ‪ ١٨٢‬ﻣﻢ ‪ ٥٣ x‬ﻣﻢ ‪ ١٠٧ x‬ﻣﻢ‬ ‫‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﻳﺴﻴﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ٠٫٥٤‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪Windows Media Audio‬‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ ‪WMA‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 20‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:13 PM‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺻﻤﺎﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ‪/‬‬
‫)‪ (A‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫)‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ) ‪(٩‬‬
‫)‪ (B‬ﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻳﺒﺮﺯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪/‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻀﺎﺀ‪/‬ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ(‬ ‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫)‪ (C‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ(‬ ‫ﺧﻀﺮﺍﺀ‪/‬ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪ (D‬ﺿﻔﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪،Kenwood‬‬
‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ(‬ ‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫)‪ (E‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻓﻴﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ )ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﺍﻭ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١٩‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪١٢‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺳﻠﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ( ﻭﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ( ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪(١٩ ) .‬‬ ‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻨﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺎﺱ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺎﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻔﻨﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺜﻨﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ [ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺭﻳﺾ )ﺳﻮﺩﺍﺀ( ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.°٣٠‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ( ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﻓﻲ ﻛﻼ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ١٢‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ( ﻣﻊ ﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ )ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻏﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻟﺸﺎﺳﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺑﻤﻨﺼﻬﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻦ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬ ‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪(١٩ ) .‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﻠﻮ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ [ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪(٣ ) .‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪(٩ ) .‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﻯ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟـ ‪.iPod‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“iPod ERROR‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪(١١ ) .[ECHO CANCEL‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.iPod‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﻫﺮﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﻮﺍﻓﻆ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺍﺻﻞ ”‪“READING‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻄﻮﺍﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻭﺀﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻄﻖ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﺟﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ(‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“N/A VOICE TAG‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ )ﻣﺜﻼ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻟﺒﻮﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺠﺢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪“ADD ERROR‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ“‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NOT SUPPORT‬‬ ‫”‪“SEARCH ERROR‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‪/‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ”‪. “NO ENTRY‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪“CHECK DEVICE‬‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO PAIR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪“NO SKIPS‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪“ERROR‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“ERROR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫®‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫”‪“NO STATIONS‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫‪Pandora‬‬
‫”‪“STATION LIMIT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO INFO‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Pandora‬‬ ‫”‪“UPGRADE APP‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪“CONNECT ERROR‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‪/‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪“RATING ERROR‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺃﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻠﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Pandora‬ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫”‪“LICENSE ERROR‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪(٣ ) .‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫)‪) .(AVRCP‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫®‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“HF ERROR XX‬‬ ‫‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(١٠ ) .‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“BT ERROR‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‪(DEVICE DELETE ،١٣ ) .‬‬ ‫”‪.“DEVICE FULL‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻼﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪iPhone/iPod‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫‪Made for‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻓﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4th ،3rd ،2nd ،1st) iPod touch -‬ﻭ ‪(5th generation‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪iPod classic -‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/audiofile/ :‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻻﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6th ،5th ،4th ،3rd) iPod nano -‬ﻭ ‪(7th generation‬‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪ “PROTECT‬ﻭﻻ‬ ‫‪5 ،4S ،4 ،3GS ،iPhone 3G ،iPhone -‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪(flac.) FLAC ،(wav.) WAV ،(wma.) WMA ،(mp3.) MP3‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ،iPod/iPhone‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،FAT12 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/ipod‬‬ ‫‪FAT32 ،FAT16‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪(٢ ) .‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPod‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫”‪ “KENWOOD‬ﺃﻭ “ ” ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.iPod‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Pandora‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ ﻭﻧﻴﻮﺯﻟﻨﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪/WMA/MP3‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪(٣ ) .‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻐﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﹰﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻫﻮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ FLAC/WAV‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫•‬
‫• ﺍﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺭﺩﻱﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.USB‬‬
‫• ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻟﺪ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ Pandora‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻪ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NA FILE‬‬ ‫‪.pandora-support@pandora.com‬‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ) .‬ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻧﺒﺬﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“READ ERROR‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪KENWOOD Music Control‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪.Android™ KENWOOD Music Control‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،USB‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO DEVICE‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‬ ‫•‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/ :‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“COPY PRO‬‬ ‫‪ ،KENWOOD Music Control‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NA DEVICE‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ KENWOOD Music Control‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“NO MUSIC‬‬
‫‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪/JAZZ /EASY /POPS /ROCK /POWERFUL /TOP40 /DRIVE EQ‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪...‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪PRESET EQ‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎ ﹺﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ :USER /NATURAL‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﹸ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪) .‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ]‪ [USER‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[AUDIO CONTROL‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫]‪ [DRIVE EQ‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ :LV3 /LV2 /LV1‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪BASS BOOST‬‬ ‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫‪ :LV2 /LV1‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫‪LOUDNESS‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ AUD‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪.[AUDIO CONTROL‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ K / J‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ENT IW‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SUBWOOFER SET‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ :THROUGH‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‪ .‬؛ ‪/120HZ /85HZ‬‬ ‫‪LPF SUBWOOFER‬‬
‫‪ :160HZ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٨٥‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ١٢٠ /‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ١٦٠/‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ –15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (0) +15‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪SUB-W LEVEL‬‬
‫‪ :(°٠) NORMAL /(°١٨٠) REVERSE‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‬ ‫‪SUB-W PHASE‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺀ‪) .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(+6) +8‬‬ ‫‪BASS LEVEL‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ [THROUGH‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪) .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(+5) +8‬‬ ‫‪MID LEVEL‬‬
‫]‪(.[LPF SUBWOOFER‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(0) +8‬‬ ‫‪TRE LEVEL‬‬
‫‪ :THROUGH‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬؛‬ ‫‪HPF‬‬
‫‪ :150HZ /120HZ /100HZ‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪EQ PRO‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ١٢٠ /‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ ‪ ١٥٠/‬ﻫﻴﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :200 /100 /80 /60‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪BASS CTR FRQ BASS ADJUST‬‬
‫‪ R15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :(0) F15‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪FADER‬‬ ‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :(+6) +8‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪BASS LEVEL‬‬
‫‪ L15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :(0) R15‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪BALANCE‬‬ ‫‪ :2.00 /1.50 /1.25 /1.00 BASS Q FACTOR‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) +8‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ ‪ (AUX‬؛ ‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 0‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪VOLUME OFFSET‬‬ ‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪BASS EXTEND‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﻞ‬ ‫)ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪(0 :‬‬
‫‪ :2.5K /1.5K /1.0K /0.5K‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MID CTR FRQ‬‬ ‫‪MID ADJUST‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪) .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :(+5) +8‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MID LEVEL‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺻﻮﺗﹰﺎ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪SOUND RECNSTR‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺿﺎﻋﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ :1.25 /1.00 /0.75‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MID Q FACTOR‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ :17.5K /15.0K /12.5K /10.0K‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TRE CTR FRQ‬‬ ‫‪TRE ADJUST‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪/[LPF SUBWOOFER] /[SUBWOOFER SET] / [SUB-W LEVEL‬‬
‫‪ –8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :(0) +8‬ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TRE LEVEL‬‬
‫]‪ [SUB-W PHASE‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [SWITCH PREOUT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪(٤ ) .[SUB-W‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [SUB-W PHASE] /[LPF SUBWOOFER] / [SUB-W LEVEL‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [SUBWOOFER SET‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[DISPLAY‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Pandora‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟـ ]‪(٤ ) .[PANDORA SRC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ (Android‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪(٩ ) .Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B SRC‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.PANDORA‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Pandora‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(٩ ) .iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫‪/COLOR 24 — COLOR 01 /VARIABLE SCAN‬‬ ‫‪COLOR SELECT‬‬
‫‪ :USER‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪) [COLOR 24] — [COLOR 01‬ﻟﻮﻥ ‪) - (١‬ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ (٢٤‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [USER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [USER‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) B SRC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SRC‬ﻓﻲ ‪ (RC-406‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪) BT AUDIO‬ﺻﻮﺕ ‪.(Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪) (B /G /R‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺑﻨﻲ( ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 6 IW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،(9‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ –‪ #FM+ / *AM‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﻌﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ‬ ‫‪DIMMER‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪.[BRIGHTNESS‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ :LVL 31 — LVL 0‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪BRIGHTNESS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫‪ :ONCE /AUTO‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﻤﺮﺭ‬ ‫‪TEXT SCROLL‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﻤﺮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪REPEAT OFF ،FILE REPEAT ،ALL REPEAT‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫‪RANDOM OFF ،FOLDER RANDOM‬‬ ‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪.“ALL RANDOM‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪١٤‬‬

‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬

‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[BT MODE‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CALL HISTORY‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[PHONE BOOK‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ ،[NUMBER DIAL‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬
‫‪PHONE SELECT‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ”‪) “STORED‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUDIO SELECT‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒ ﹰﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [NUMBER DIAL‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DEVICE DELETE‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [YES‬ﻧﻌﻢ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [NO‬ﻻ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﹰ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DVC PRIORITY‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫” “ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻛﺄﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬
‫‪ “DL PB‬ﻭﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ”‬ ‫‪*TRANSFER PB‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )‪(OPP‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “NO MEMORY‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪PIN CODE EDIT‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(0000‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪.PBAP‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [CALL HISTORY‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[PHONE BOOK‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪RECONNECT‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUTO PAIRING‬‬
‫)‪ (iPod touch/iPhone‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑـ‬
‫‪ .USB‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ iOS‬ﻟﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [DELETE ONE‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[DELETE ALL‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ iPod touch/iPhone‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :DELETE ONE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ :FRONT‬ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﺎﺭﹰﺍ ﻭﻳﻤﻴﻨﹰﺎ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :ALL‬ﺗﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫‪BT HF/AUDIO‬‬ ‫‪ :DELETE ALL‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٦‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [YES‬ﻧﻌﻢ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [NO‬ﻻ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺩﻓﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫)ﺑﻤﺎ‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ :YES‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪INITIALIZE‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪ .‬؛ ‪ :NO‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬ ‫‪SETTINGS‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪PHONE BOOK‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :30 —1‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬؛‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪AUTO ANSWER‬‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :SYSTEM‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﻧﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪/‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪RING MODE‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،PBAP‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫• ‪ :CALL‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )‪ (TONE 1 — 5‬ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،PBAP‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫• ‪ :MESSAGE‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ )‪ (TONE 1 — 5‬ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫”‪ .“TRANSFER PB‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫) ‪(TRANSFER PB ،١٣‬‬
‫‪ :PHONE‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﻼﻣﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪) MO :‬ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺟﻮﺍﻝ(‪HM ،‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺭﻧﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﻋﻤﻪ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻨﺰﻝ(‪) OF ،‬ﻣﻜﺘﺐ(‪) OT ،‬ﺁﺧﺮ(‪) GE ،‬ﻋﺎﻡ(‬
‫‪ ON:‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﻧﻴﻨﺎ ﹰ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “SMS RECEIVED‬ﻹﺑﻼﻏﻚ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪*SMS NOTIFY‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻄﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ”‪ “Ú‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ”‪(.“U‬‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ) ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪NUMBER‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﻣﻦ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (Z‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ ) ‪.(+ ،# ،‬‬ ‫‪DIAL‬‬
‫• ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[PHONE BOOK‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺠﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ )‪ .(ABCDEFGHIJK‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫‪. /‬‬ ‫) ‪ WXYZ1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(LMNOPQRSTUV‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (9‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ”‪.“1‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﹼ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻄﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪VOICE‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ” “‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ ،‬ﹼ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪،١١ ) .‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :FULL /MID /LOW‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪*BATT‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ :MAX /MID /LOW /NO SIGNAL‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪*SIGNAL‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬

‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺭﻧﻴﻨﹰﺎ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪.“SMS RECEIVED‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 6 IW‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺮ‬
‫• ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ [00] :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [35‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪([15] :‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻪ ﺃﻭﻻ ﹰ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪(DVC PRIORITY ،١٣ ) .‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻄﻖ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﹸﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.iPhone‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﹰ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪...‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ :(0) +8 — –20‬ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MIC GAIN‬‬
‫‪ :(–10) –20 — –5‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪NR LEVEL‬‬
‫‪CALL‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪ “I‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪ “O‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫‪HISTORY‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪ “M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :(4) 10 — 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫‪ECHO CANCEL‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISP SCRL‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )‪ NUMBER‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(NAME‬‬ ‫ﺻﺪﻯ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “NO DATA‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Bluetooth‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺴﺠﻼ ﹰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“PLEASE PAIR YOUR PHONE‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ )ﺗﻢ ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻧﻬﺎ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )‪ (KMM-X5*BT‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻲ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ )‪.(SSP‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “TESTING‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )‪ OK‬ﺃﻭ ‪) (NG‬ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B SRC‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : PAIRING‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ )‪ (KMM-X5*BT‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ :HF CNT‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )‪(HFP‬‬ ‫‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ :AUD CNT‬ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ )‪(A2DP‬‬ ‫”‪ “PASS XXXXXX” “PAIRING‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ”‪“PRESS‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )‪(PBAP‬‬ ‫‪:PB DL‬‬ ‫”‪ - “VOLUME KNOB‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B SRC‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪) “PAIRING OK‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‪ “BT‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫)‪ (PIN‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ )ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (Bluetooth‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ iPod touch‬ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﹰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑـ ‪) .USB‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (6‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [AUTO PAIRING‬ﺍﻹﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪) [ON‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪(١٣ ) (.‬‬
‫‪.(RC-406‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻺﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺇﺿﺎﺀﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [AUTO ANSWER‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪(١٢ ) .‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) B SRC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺾ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪) B SRC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬
‫‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬

‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬ ‫®‪Pandora‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 6 IW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ )‪ ،(iPod touch /iPhone‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.Pandora‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‬ ‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [ON‬ﻟـ ]‪(٤ ) .[PANDORA SRC‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺿﺎ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ Pandora‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ (+) T‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [FROM TRACK‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [FROM ARTIST‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻣﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) KCA-iP102‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ( ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(5‬‬ ‫‪*iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ .Bluetooth‬ﺃﻛﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪/PANDORA FRONT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ PANDORA) PANDORA REAR‬ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(5‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ PANDORA‬ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ( ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ )‪(HFP‬‬ ‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪(SPP‬‬ ‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ )‪(PBAP‬‬ ‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ )‪(OPP‬‬ ‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ K / J‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ )‪(A2DP‬‬ ‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(AVRCP‬‬ ‫– ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫]‪ :[BY DATE‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ :[A-Z‬ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٩‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬

‫‪AUX‬‬ ‫‪iPod / USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [ON‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ]‪(٤ ) .[BUILT-IN AUX‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ iPod‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪...KMC /KME Light‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.DIRECT‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺀ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[USB‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ،[SKIP SEARCH‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪KMC /KME Light ،iPod‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪) 0.5%‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪ :10% /5% /1% /‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺴﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪...iPod‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٥‬ﻣﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ”‪) “L‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍﺀ(‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B SRC‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.AUX‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ )ﻓﺌﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ( ﺑﻄﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ (SD‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺮﻓﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﻢ ‪AUX‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪...‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ T / S‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 5 iPod‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪،[SYSTEM‬‬ ‫‪ ٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﻭ(‬ ‫‪ ٧‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ ،[AUX NAME SET‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٧‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[USB‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪0‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،9‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ” *“ ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AUX‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪/VIDEO /GAME /PORTABLE /DVD /‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ ،[MUSIC DRIVE‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.5 iPod‬‬
‫]‪.[DRIVE CHANGE‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ [DRIVE 1] :‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪[DRIVE 5‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬

‫‪iPod / USB‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ ‪ :iPod‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫]‪(٦ ) .[MODE OFF‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ :FLAC/WAV/WMA/MP3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ‪ iPod‬ﺃﻭ ‪ KMC /KME Light‬ﻣﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) 6 IW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‪،ARTISTS ،PLAYLISTS‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫‪،GENRES ،*PODCASTS ،SONGS ،ALBUMS‬‬
‫‪.(*COMPOSERS‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫* ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.iPod‬‬ ‫)ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ –‪ #FM+ / *AM‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ *‪٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻠﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.5 iPod‬‬ ‫‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ *‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ FLAC/WAV/WMA/MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪،FOLDER REPEAT ،FILE REPEAT :iPod‬‬
‫‪REPEAT OFF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪...‬‬ ‫• ‪KENWOOD Music Control /(KME Light) KENWOOD Music Editor Light‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(‬ ‫)‪ (KMC‬ﻣﻠﻒ ) ‪REPEAT OFF ،FILE REPEAT :(١٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒ ﹰﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪.T / S‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ *‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪(٨ ) .‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ FLAC/WAV/WMA/MP3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPod‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪:KMC /KME Light‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ“ ﹰ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ T / S‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪RANDOM OFF ،FOLDER RANDOM‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ )‪ (%١٠‬ﺃﻳﹰﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪.“ALL RANDOM‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ ‪ :USB‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ‪.KMC /KME Light‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .FLAC/WAV/WMA/MP3‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻊ ‪.iPod‬‬ ‫*‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻠﻲ ‪ :iPod‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[MODE OFF‬‬ ‫*‪٤‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬

‫‪iPod / USB‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ :ON‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪TI‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ .PTY‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫‪PTY SEARCH‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ‪ ،(GERMAN /FRENCH /ENGLISH) PTY‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪CA-U1EX‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪T / S‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ‪(mA ٥٠٠ :‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬ ‫‪CLOCK‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬؛‬ ‫‪TIME SYNC‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[PTY SEARCH] /[TI] /[AF SET] /[REGIONAL] /[NEWS SET] /[MONO SET‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ‪ FM3 /FM2 /FM1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫• ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪:‬‬
‫‪) INFO ،AFFAIRS ،NEWS :SPEECH‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪،DRAMA ،EDUCATE ،SPORT ،‬‬
‫‪iPhone/iPod‬‬ ‫‪،CHILDREN ،FINANCE ،WEATHER ،VARIED ،SCIENCE ،CULTURE‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪DOCUMENT ،LEISURE ،TRAVEL ،PHONE IN ،RELIGION ،SOCIAL‬‬
‫‪) POP M :MUSIC‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪) ROCK M ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪) EASY M ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪،‬‬
‫‪) LIGHT M‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪) OTHER M ،CLASSICS ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪،JAZZ ،‬‬
‫‪) NATION M ،COUNTRY‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‪) FOLK M ،OLDIES ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ(‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻒ ﺗﺤﺖ ]‪ [SPEECH‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [MUSIC‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺀ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫‪) KCA-iP102‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ( ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪١*iPhone/iPod‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 5 iPod‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.iPod‬‬

‫‪ :MODE ON‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪.٢*iPod‬‬
‫‪ :MODE OFF‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ iPhone/iPod‬ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬

‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ TuneIn Radio‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TuneIn Radio Pro‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(Aupeo‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DIRECT‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENT IW‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ‪.DIRECT‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﻮﺍ ﹴﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ B SRC‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪.TUNER‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ –‪ #FM+ / *AM‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪BAND‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫‪ (RC-406‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.SW2 /SW1 /MW /FM3 /FM2 /FM1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) T / S‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (+) T / S‬ﻓﻲ ‪(RC-406‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟـ ‪ : T / S‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪SEEK‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬ ‫‪ :AUTO1‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :AUTO2‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪TUNER SETTING‬‬ ‫‪ :MANUAL‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ‪ SW2 /SW1 /MW‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬؛‬ ‫• ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(6‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) (6‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪LOCAL SEEK‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (6‬ﻓﻲ ‪.(RC-406‬‬
‫‪ :YES AUTO MEMORY‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺟﻴﺪ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :NO‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪) .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [NORMAL‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪(.[PRESET TYPE‬‬
‫) ‪(٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ FM‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﻩ‪ .‬؛‬ ‫‪MONO SET‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻦ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٥٠ : FM‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ ٩ :MW‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪ .‬؛‬ ‫‪ :ON‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﹰﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ B SRC‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪NEWS SET‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ ،5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.B SRC‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪REGIONAL‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ”‪ .“AF‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍﺀ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺒﺚ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪AF SET‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺳﺎﺑ ﹰﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Radio Data System‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻴﺊ‪ .‬؛‬
‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.STANDBY‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[FUNCTION‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪XX :‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪AUDIO CONTROL‬‬ ‫”‪“VOLUME KNOB” “PRESS” “CANCEL DEMO‬‬
‫‪ :SUB-W /REAR SWITCH PREOUT‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺆﺧﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [YES‬ﻛﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :OEM /6/9 × 6 /4/5 /OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻓ ﹰﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ )‪-٥‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪SP SELECT‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ”‪.“DEMO OFF‬‬
‫‪-٤‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪-٩X٦ ،‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪-٦‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ OEM‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪TUNER SETTING‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ :NORMAL‬ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫‪PRESET TYPE‬‬
‫)‪ .(SW2 /SW1 /MW /FM3 /FM2 /FM1‬؛ ‪ :MIX‬ﻳﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CLOCK‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪SYSTEM‬‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CLOCK ADJUST‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪KEY BEEP‬‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﻳﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﺴﻴﺖ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ACC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .OFF‬؛‬ ‫‪TDF ALARM‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ :OFF‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[CLOCK FORMAT‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪SOURCE SELECT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [12H‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[24H‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :ON PANDORA SRC‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ PANDORA‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ‪(٩ ) .‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ :ON‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ AUX‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :OFF‬ﻣﻌﻄﻞ‪(٨ ) .‬‬ ‫‪BUILT-IN AUX‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺮﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪F/W UPDATE‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪...‬‬
‫‪UPDATE SYSTEM/ UPDATE BT‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DISP SCRL‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ :YES F/W UP xx.xx‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ .‬؛ ‪ :NO‬ﻳﻠﻐﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺸﻄﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻧﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪www.kenwood.com/cs/ce/‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﹺ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺳ ﹼﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺃﹶ‬
‫ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪(RC-406‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ )ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻀﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪(.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎﺀ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺀ‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﹰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SRC‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.B SRC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫) ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ SRC‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪( .‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.VOL‬‬ ‫‪ VOL‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ATT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SRC‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ B SRC‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DISP SCRL‬ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫) ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ (‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺑﻲ |‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺬﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﺎﻫﻚ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﹰ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻵﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﹺ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺳ ﹼﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺃﹶ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ USB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPhone/iPod‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﺘﺮﺽ ﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪iPod / USB‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻧﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪AUX‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫®‪Pandora‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ )‪:(RC-406‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺭﻳﻤﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫®‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﺒﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻮﺭﹰﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫• ﺃﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١٦‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻼﺡ ‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ :‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻠﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪ :‬ﻓﻚ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻘﺮﺃ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬

‫• ﺃﻭﺿﺤﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ [XX‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ) ‪ (XX‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬

KMM-X50BT
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎ ﺕ‬
© 2013 JVC KENWOOD Corporation
JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_C001A_AR.indd 1 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 23/12/2013 3:46:52 PM


Kenwood Radio Manual GET0993-001A

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kenwood Radio Manual GET0993-001A

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

KMM-X50BT

DIGITAL MEDIA RECEIVER

© 2013 JVC KENWOOD Corporation GET0993-001A (MN)

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 1 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:28 AM

How to read this manual

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 2 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:29 AM

Volume knob Remote sensor (Do

Pull out the insulation sheet

How to replace the battery

Your preset adjustments

To Do this (on the faceplate) Do this (on the remote control)

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 3 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 17/12/2013 2:39:50 PM

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 4 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 5 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 6 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM

Select a file from a list

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 7 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 8 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 9 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM

Pair a Bluetooth device Bluetooth test mode

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 10 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:30 AM

To Do this Text message notification

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 11 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:31 AM

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 12 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 17/12/2013 2:40:42 PM

Store a contact in memory Bluetooth mode settings

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 13 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 23/12/2013 4:30:50 PM

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 14 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:31 AM

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 15 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:31 AM

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 16 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:31 AM

Symptom Remedy Symptom Remedy

player cannot be (Refer to the instructions of your audio player.)

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 17 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 10/12/2013 4:38:51 PM

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_03_EN.indd 18 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 5/12/2013 10:14:31 AM

Fuse (10 A) Front output, Rear/subwoofer output (A) Faceplate

Microphone Antenna terminal

Green To the power control terminal when using

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 19 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 17/12/2013 2:42:45 PM

Profile)/ PBAP (Phonebook Access Profile)/

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (1 kHz) 105 dB Input Impedance 30 kΩ

MP3 Decode Compliant with MPEG-1/2 Audio Layer-3

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 20 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 23/12/2013 12:14:42 PM

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_f_EN.indd 21 Data Size: B6L (182 mm x 128 mm) 23/12/2013 12:35:15 PM

JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 21 23/12/2013 3:05:12 PM

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 20‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:13 PM‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 19‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:13 PM‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 18‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:13 PM‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻋﺮﺍﺽ‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 17‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:14 PM‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 16‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:14 PM‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 15‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:14 PM‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 14‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:14 PM‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 13‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 4:49:22 PM‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 12‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:15 PM‬‬

‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 11‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:15 PM‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺇﻗﺮﺍﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪Bluetooth‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 10‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:15 PM‬‬

‫‪ ١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 9‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:15 PM‬‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 8‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:16 PM‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﹰﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫‪JS_KWD_KMM_X50BT_MN_AR_03.indd 7‬‬ ‫‪23/12/2013 3:05:16 PM‬‬